Transcript Final Review-A Part
Slide 1
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 2
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 3
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 4
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 5
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 6
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 7
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 8
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 9
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 10
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 11
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 12
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 13
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 14
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 15
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 16
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 17
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 18
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 19
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 20
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 21
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 22
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 23
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 24
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 25
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 26
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 27
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 28
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 29
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 30
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 31
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 32
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 33
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 34
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 35
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 36
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 37
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 38
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 39
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 40
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 41
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 42
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 43
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 44
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 45
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 46
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 47
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 48
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 49
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 50
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 51
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 52
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 53
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 54
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 55
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 56
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 57
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 58
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 59
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 60
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 61
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 62
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 63
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 64
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 65
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 66
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 67
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 68
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 69
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 70
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 71
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 72
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 73
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 74
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 75
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 76
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 77
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 78
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 79
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 80
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 81
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 82
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 83
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 84
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 85
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 86
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 87
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 88
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 89
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 90
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 91
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 92
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 93
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 94
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 95
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 96
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 97
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 98
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 99
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 100
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 101
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 102
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 103
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 104
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 105
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 106
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 107
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 108
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 109
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 110
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 111
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 112
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 113
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 114
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 115
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 116
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 117
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 118
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 119
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 120
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 121
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 122
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 123
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 124
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 125
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 126
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 127
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 128
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 129
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 130
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 131
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 132
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 133
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 134
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 135
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 136
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 137
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 138
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 139
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 140
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 141
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 142
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 143
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 144
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 145
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 146
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 147
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 148
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 149
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 150
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 151
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 152
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 153
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 154
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 155
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 156
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 157
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 158
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 159
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 160
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 161
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 162
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 163
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 164
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 165
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 166
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 167
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 168
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 169
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 170
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 171
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 172
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 173
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 174
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 175
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 176
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 177
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 178
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 179
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 180
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 181
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 182
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 2
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 3
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 4
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 5
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 6
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 7
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 8
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 9
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 10
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 11
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 12
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 13
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 14
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 15
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 16
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 17
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 18
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 19
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 20
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 21
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 22
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 23
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 24
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 25
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 26
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 27
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 28
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 29
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 30
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 31
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 32
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 33
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 34
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 35
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 36
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 37
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 38
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 39
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 40
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 41
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 42
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 43
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 44
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 45
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 46
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 47
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 48
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 49
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 50
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 51
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 52
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 53
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 54
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 55
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 56
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 57
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 58
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 59
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 60
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 61
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 62
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 63
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 64
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 65
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 66
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 67
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 68
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 69
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 70
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 71
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 72
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 73
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 74
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 75
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 76
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 77
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 78
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 79
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 80
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 81
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 82
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 83
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 84
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 85
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 86
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 87
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 88
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 89
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 90
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 91
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 92
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 93
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 94
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 95
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 96
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 97
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 98
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 99
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 100
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 101
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 102
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 103
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 104
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 105
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 106
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 107
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 108
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 109
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 110
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 111
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 112
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 113
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 114
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 115
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 116
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 117
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 118
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 119
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 120
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 121
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 122
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 123
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 124
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 125
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 126
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 127
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 128
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 129
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 130
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 131
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 132
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 133
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 134
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 135
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 136
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 137
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 138
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 139
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 140
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 141
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 142
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 143
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 144
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 145
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 146
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 147
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 148
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 149
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 150
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 151
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 152
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 153
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 154
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 155
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 156
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 157
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 158
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 159
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 160
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 161
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 162
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 163
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 164
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 165
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 166
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 167
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 168
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 169
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 170
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 171
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 172
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 173
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 174
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 175
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 176
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 177
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 178
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 179
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 180
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 181
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review
Slide 182
BCIS 1 A REVIEW
FOR FINAL EXAM
1. What is the name
of the Office XP
spreadsheet
program?
Excel
*2. What are
filenames?
1) Names given to files when
saving a file. They provide a
unique description of the
document or file.
2) When naming a file, the
user is limited to a maximum
of 255 characters or letters.
3) The filename can also
have spaces within the name
, but some characters are
excluded.
3. What are the
Undo, Redo, and
Repeat commands?
1) These are used when
wanting to undo, or redo
previous changes to text.
2) Undo
Command: reverses recent
actions. The command is
Edit, Undo (Will only undo
the last action) or press
the icon which looks like a
backwards arrow.
3) Redo Command:
Reverses an undo
action. The icon button is a
forward arrow.
4) Repeat
Command: Repeats your
last action. Choose Edit,
Repeat
*4. What is the
difference between
Save As and Save?
1) The 1st time the user
saves a document or gives it
another filename, File, Save
As is chosen. The user then
determines if they want to
save to the "A" or "C" drive.
2) When a user wants to
"resave" a document after
changes are made, they
those File, Save.
5 & 71. What is a
Web browser?
1) Software used to
display Web pages on
your computer monitor.
2) Examples of a browser
software are: Microsoft
Internet Explorer or
Netscape Navigator.
*6. What is
software?
1) A list of instructions
that computers follow
to perform specific
tasks. Examples of
software would
be: Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, etc.
2)Programs , files,
and data
6. What are the
physical parts of a
computer called?
1) Hardware
2) Examples of
hardware are: Printer,
Monitor, Speakers,
Keyboard, Mouse, etc
* 7. If you don’t
know the function
of a button on the
tool bar?
Move the mouse
pointer over the
button and the name
will appear – DO NOT
CLICK. Right clicking
gives a list of all
toolbars.
8. When Windows XP
starts, the computer's
desktop (where all the
icons are), taskbar
(gray bar at bottom),
and Start button/menu
appear on the screen.
*9. What are the 2
ways in which
documents can be
printed?
1) Portrait
orientation: This is the
default, and the documents
are longer (vertical) than
they are wide (8 1/2 X 11)
2) Landscape
orientation: are wider
(horizontal) than they are
long (11X 8 1/2)
3) How do I access the
command?: File, Page
Setup, Paper size
10. Who is Bill
Gates?
He is the founder
and former CEO of
MicroSoft
*11. Who is the
father of computers?
Charles Babbage, In
the 1800’s he created
the an analytical
machine and the
difference engine. But
his machines never
worked never worked.
*12. What is the
Clipboard?
1) Temporary storage space
in memory, which will store
cut or copied text sent it up
to 24 items or until the user
clears the Clipboard.
2) Command: Choose View,
Task Pane, to view
*13. What is the
difference between
the "A" drive and the
"C" drive?
1) The "A" drive is the
where the floppy disk
is placed. It can only
hold 1.44 MB of files.
2) The "C" drive is where
the "Big Disk" is located
inside the computer. It is
usually called the hard
drive. It stores many files.
14. Is it a good idea
to emphasize an
important part of a
document by
highlighting it in
another color?
YES
15. & 59 & 57 What
is the difference
between doubleclicking and tripleclicking?
1) Double-clicking
highlights the word.
2) Triple-clicking
highlights the
paragraph.
16. What is a font?
1) A font is the
typeface of letters.
Fonts can be dressy
(serif) or casual (sans
serif).
2) Command(s): for
font is Format, Font or
choose the Font dialog
box from the
Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is
more than one way
to change fonts
*17 & *34. How do
you access the
shortcut menu?
Click the Right
mouse button
17-A & 34. What are
the shortcut
commands?
Cut, Copy, Paste,
Hyperlink, font,
paragraph, bullets
and numbering,
define, synonyms
17-B What is the Cut
Command?
1) It allows the user to move
or delete text.
2) Command: Edit, Cut, the
Scissor icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Cut.
17-C What is the
Copy Command?
1) It allows the user to make
a duplicate of text.
2) Command: Edit, Copy;
the Copy icon, or right click
selected text and choose
Copy.
18. What is FONT
style?
Bold, Italics,
Underline. Therefore,
more than one font
style at a time can be
applied to selected text
19-A. What is font
case?
UPPER CASE (capitals)
lower case
Sentence case.
Title Case
tOGGLE cASE
19-B. What are FONT
effects?
Strikethroughs,
shadows,
,
superscripts
are all
subscripts,
examples of font
effects
20.What are the 2
types of fonts?
1) Serif fonts: These
are considered dressy
fonts used in the
body of a document ,
they have lines or curly
cues at the end of
them. (Here is an example
of a serif font: Times New
Roman)
2) Sans Serif:
Characters or lines
without lines or curly
cues at the end of the
characters. (Here is an
example of a sans serif
font: Arial
21. After you set the
first-line indent in
one paragraph all
subsequent
paragraphs that you
key will have the
same first-line
indent.
22. & *25. What are
tabs?
1) It marks the place where
the insertion point will stop
when the tab key is pressed.
2) Tabs can be aligned by
the left, center, right,
decimal, or bar.
3) Tabs are useful for
creating tables or aligning
numbered items.
4) Tabs may be preceded by
solid, dotted, or dashed lines
called leaders, which fill in
blank spaces before the tab
setting.
5) The default setting
for tabs and indents is
.5 inch or ½ inch”
* 23. & 39. What
are the types of
indent?
1) There are several types:
a) Left or Right Indent:
Indents text from either the
left or right margin.
b) First Line Indent:
Indents only the 1st line of
text.
(Note: After you set a 1st
Line Indent in one
paragraph, all subsequent
paragraphs will have the
same 1st line indent)
c) Hanging Indent:
Indents all other lines except
the 1st one
24. & *88. To
make text easier to
read it’s a good idea
to double space. One
full blank line
between text.
26. How can I
change the
appearance of a
bullet or numbered
list?
1) Choose Format,
Bullets/Numbering
2) Click either the Bulleted or
Numbered tab in the dialog
box.
3) you can change more than
just the appearance of a
bullet. You can also change
the amount of indent.
27-A. How does
Word indicate a
spelling error?
With a wavy red
underline
27-B. How does
Word indicate a
grammatical error?
With a wavy green
underline
*28. Word will
automatically update
the date and time in
a document if you
use Insert, date and
time and check the
automatic update
feature.
29-A. Up to how many
columns (even or
uneven) can you draw
in Word XP?
14 columns
*29-B. & *91. What
are columns and
how do I create
them?
1) Columns separate text
vertically down a page such
as a newsletter.
2) Command(s): Format,
Columns or pressing the
Columns icon/button on the
toolbar.
3) In the Columns dialog box
the user can specify the
number of columns desired
(you can create up to 14
columns), the width of the
columns, if a line is to
separate the columns, etc.
4) When creating columns,
Word automatically
switches to Print Layout View
so that the columns will
appear side by side on the
screen.
30. Will Word allow
you to draw graphics in
Normal View?
NO! You must be in
print layout view
*31. Can you cut,
copy and paste
objects the same
way you do text?
YES
32. When doing a
search, what are
wildcards?
Allows you to find a
specific sequence of
letters. Using “?”s
(each “?” represents 1
character) or one “*”
(unlimited characters
which even ignores
spaces) in a search.
To find part of a
word you don’t have
to use a wildcard.
*33. Shift-clicking
allows you to select
more than one object?
35 What is sorting?
Putting paragraphs
or table items
columns in order
either ascending (az, 0-9) or
descending (z-a or
9-0)
36. How is clipart
edited?
1) By using the Picture
toolbar.
2) This toolbar can be used
to change the image to black
& white grayscale; increase
or decrease the contrast or
brightness; crop the image;
resize the object and
maintain proportions
(scale), etc.
37. Why use 3-D
effects on text?
To enhance a
.
However, You must
use WordArt. 3-D
makes a paragraph
hard to read and
cannot be done
through text effects.
*38. What’s the
difference between
manual page breaks
and automatic page
breaks?
Word inserts
automatic page
breaks. You insert
manual page breaks.
Manual page breaks
say page break. Both
have dotted lines.
*40. Can WordArt
be inserted more
than one way?
YES! Two ways
include (1) By insert,
picture, WordArt or
(2) by using the
WordArt button on
the drawing tool bar
*41. & *54 & *96.
What are headers vs.
footers?
1) A header is text that
prints at the top of each
page.
2) A footer is text that
prints at the bottom of the
page.
3) The command is View,
Header/Footer. Their own
toolbar appears where the
user can insert the date,
time, page numbers,
etc.(note Word assumes the
same header and footer will
be used on every page).
* 42. How do I
convert Word
documents into Web
documents?
1) Word documents can be
converted into web pages by
choosing File, Save As Web
Page from the File menu.
2) Word converts the
document to a HTML (Hyper
Text Markup Language)
format so that it can be
uploaded to the internet.
3) Web Layout View is
what Word switches to when
documents are converted to
a web page.
43. What menu is
Word Count in?
Tools menu, used to
count words, pages,
paragraphs and lines
in a document?
44. Is there only one
way to insert clipart?
No, The clipart
gallery, downloading
from the internet,
uploading from a file
on disk, to name a
few.
45. Does WordArt
convert text to a
graphic object?
YES
*46 75. & *99. What
is Integration?
1) Integration means
combining parts into a whole.
A user can integrate data
within an application.
2) For example, in Word you
can insert a hyperlink or link
(shows up as blue text with a
blue underline) that connects 2
documents together or embed
an object within a document
*47. What is a
theme?
1) A theme is a good way to
enhance a Web page. It is a
pre-formatted design that
you can apply to a document
to enhance its appearance
without changing the
content.
2) Themes change color,
fonts, and the formatting of
your document to provide a
new look.
3) Command: Format,
Theme
4) To view your document as
it will look in a web browser,
choose File, Web Page
Preview
What is the
difference between
the source file and
the destination file?
1) The file you are moving
data form is called the
source file.
2) The file you are
moving data to is called
the destination file.
*48. & *49 & *60
What is a table?
1) An arrangement of rows
and columns similar to a
spreadsheet. Sometimes
they are easier to use
than aligning text with
tabs.
The intersection of a row
and column is called a
cell
2) Command: Table,
Insert then choose table
from the sub-menu or use
the Table Icon. User
must specify number of
rows and or columns.
3) The height of a row and
the width of a column may
be changed by dragging or
going to table, properties.
•To set Tabs
(1) 54. Place insertion
point in paragraph
(2) 52. Click format, tabs
(3) 55. Key tab stop
(4) 53. Choose tab align
(5) 51. Click set and OK
56. Select an entire
document by triple-clicking in
the left margin
58. Select an entire sentence
by pressing and holding
down CTRL clicking in the
sentence.
*61.& *94.What is a
template?
1) It is a file that contains
page and paragraph
formatting and text that
you can customize to
create a new document
similar to but slightly
different from the
original.
2) It is built in documents in
the software such as letters,
memos, resumes, etc
3) Templates provide spaces
to type. It’s not like a
wizard. Templates do not
guide you by asking
questions.
4) Command: To open an
existing Word template,
choose File, New and choose
your template. Word saves
templates with a .dot
extension. (Note: A user can
create his or her own
extension)
* 62. What is the
show/hide
command?
A button on the
standard tool bar
that looks like a
backward P. Used to
show paragraph
returns, spaces and
tabs.
* 64. What is
selecting?
Blackening a block of
text (by click and
dragging) to make
changes to it, copy or
delete it.
66. What is the
menu bar?
1) It is the horizontal bar
which contains titles from
which a user can choose a
variety of commands.
2) All commands are
contained here, thus I go
here when I am looking for a
command.
65 & 67 & 76 What
are toolbars?
1) They are located directly
below the title bar and they
contain icons.
2) The Standard
toolbar: contains icons or
buttons used to perform
common tasks such as
printing and opening
documents.
3) The Formatting toolbar:
contains buttons for
changing character and
paragraph functions such as
alignment and type styles
(fonts).
68. What is a search engine?
Software (such as Internet
Explorer) used to display
web pages on your
computer.
69. What are Uniform
Resource Locators (URLs)?
1) They are web
addresses used to identify
web documents.
2) Examples of URL's are:
www.microsoft.com,
www.houstonisd.org,
www.uh.edu
70. What is a Home Page?
The first page that appears
when you start your browser
or the 1st page of a web site.
72. What is Windows
XP?
1)It is the operating
software. It is used to
run the computer.
73.What is the office
XP help feature
Office Assistant
*74. What is
Integrated Software
& the name of the
Integrated Software
suite used in this
class?
1) a program that
combines several
computer applications
into one program
2) Microsoft Office 2000.
3) It is made up of
Microsoft Word, Excel,
Access, PowerPoint,
FrontPage, and Outlook.
77. What shows how a
document will look
when printed?
Print Layout
*78. What is a
microprocessor?
1) A silicon chip, which
processes the computers
instructions. It is also
called the CPU.
2) It is measured in clock
speed such as Megahertz
(millions of instructions
per second) or Gigahertz
(billion of instructions per
second).
79. Who gives
instructions to the
computer?
The user gives
instructions to the
software, then the
software gives
instructions to the
computer. Thus, both
users and software
give instructions to the
computers
*80. What is the
Print Preview
command?
1) It allows you to look at
a document as it will
appear when printed.
2) The user should always
preview a document
before it is printed
*81. What is Click
and Type?
1) It is a useful feature
that you can use to
quickly insert text
and other items into
a blank area of a
document.
*82. What is a font?
1) A font is the typeface of
letters. Fonts can be
dressy or casual.
2) Command(s): for font
is Format, Font or choose
the Font dialog box from
the Formatting toolbar.
Therefore, there is more
than one way to change
fonts
83. What are the 4
functions of a
computer?
1) Input: where information
is input into the computer.
(i.e.: keyboard, joystick,
microphone, scanner, mouse)
2) Storage: where
information or files are
stored. This may be RAM,
floppy disks, or the
hard drive.
3) Process: where
information is
processed. This is the
microprocessor (brain of the
computer)
4) Output: the end result of
information. This is where it
is seen. Examples are
screen, print outs, etc.)
What is RAM?
Random Access Memory. It
temporarily stores
documents until they are
permanently saved. RAM is
operating while the user is
working in a particular
software
*84. What is
alignment?
1) How text is positioned on
the page.
2) It shows if text is
centered, aligned left,
aligned right, or justified
*85. How are font
sizes measured?
1) By point sizes. The
higher the point size, the
higher the font. (Example:
10 pt, 12 pt, 14 pt)
2) The standard size for font
text is 12 point.
*85-B. What are
Points?
Determines the
measuring height of
characters in units
87. What are margins?
Accessed by File, Page
Setup
1) The blank space around
the top, bottom, and sides of
a document.
2) The standard for business
margins is 1 inch.
89. What is Desktop
Publishing?
1) it is the process of
combining text and graphics,
using a computer to create
interactive documents.
2) Using desktop publishing,
one can design a newsletter,
advertisement, or a program.
*90. To find only
whole words use a
“find whole words
only” option.
*92. How do I wrap
text around
graphics?
1) Select the graphic, then
choose Format, Object
(menu bar), then
Layout. Choose a wrapping
style.
2) You can also select Text
Wrapping from the Draw
menu on the Drawing toolbar
93. What is clipart?
Graphics that are
already drawn and
available for use
95. What are a predefined set of
formatting options that
have been named and
saved.
Styles
End of the Review